WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................60
4STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................76
5MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................112
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................127
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................165
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................180
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................229
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................236
11INDEX............................................................................................................................................240
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY.......................................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........................ 8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................12
Key Fob........................................................................ 12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................14
IGNITION SWITCH ..............................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................................16
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 16
To Exit Remote Start Mode ....................................... 17
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 17
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 17
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 18
Remote Start Cancel Message .................................. 18
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................18
To Arm The System ..................................................... 18
To Disarm The System................................................ 18
Rearming Of The System............................................ 19
Security System Manual Override.............................. 19
Tamper Alert................................................................ 19
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................................19
To Arm The System ..................................................... 19
To Disarm The System................................................ 20
Security System Manual Override.............................. 20
DOORS ................................................................................20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks .......................................................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......................21
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................................23
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........................23
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors ....23
STEERING WHEEL...............................................................24
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ..................................................................24
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ..................................................................24
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped...................................................................25
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ...............25
Introducing Uconnect ..................................................25
Basic Voice Commands...............................................26
Get Started...................................................................26
Additional Information.................................................26
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .................26
Programming The Memory Feature............................27
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory.........27
Memory Position Recall...............................................27
SEATS ..................................................................................27
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................28
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) ................................29
Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................30
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........................31
Head Restraints ..........................................................32
MIRRORS ............................................................................ 33
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 33
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................................... 34
Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 34
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped................................................................... 34
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped................................................. 34
Power Mirrors ............................................................. 35
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 35
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .................................... 35
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped................. 35
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) .................................................................... 36
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 36
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 36
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code
Or Non-Rolling Code Device........................................ 36
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 37
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................................. 37
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 38
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 38
Security ........................................................................ 38
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 39
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................................39
Headlight Switch ........................................................ 39
Multifunction Lever .................................................... 40
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................................ 40
High/Low Beam Switch ............................................. 40
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........................ 40
Flash-To-Pass ............................................................. 40
Automatic Headlights ................................................ 40
Parking Lights ............................................................. 41
Headlights On With Wipers......................................... 41
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped............................................ 41
Headlight Time Delay ................................................. 41
Lights-On Reminder ................................................... 41
Fog Lights — If Equipped ........................................... 41
Turn Signals ................................................................ 42
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 42
Automatic Headlight Leveling — If Equipped............. 42
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................42
Interior Courtesy Lights............................................... 42
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..........................44
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 44
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 45
CLIMATE CONTROLS .........................................................45
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ............................................................. 46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 48
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 48
Operating Tips ............................................................ 48
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................49
Storage .........................................................................49
USB/AUX Control ........................................................51
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped..............................52
Power Sunshade — If Equipped ..................................52
Power Outlets ..............................................................53
WINDOWS ..........................................................................54
Power Window Controls...............................................54
Automatic Window Features ......................................54
Reset Auto-Up .............................................................55
Window Lockout Switch ..............................................55
Wind Buffeting ............................................................55
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........................55
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ..............................56
Pinch Protect Feature..................................................56
Opening And Closing The Power Shade .....................57
Sunroof Maintenance..................................................57
Ignition Off Operation ..................................................57
HOOD ................................................................................... 57
Opening The Hood ......................................................57
Closing The Hood.........................................................58
TRUNK .................................................................................58
Opening The Trunk ......................................................58
Closing The Trunk ........................................................58
Trunk Safety.................................................................59
Cargo Area Features ...................................................59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................................... 60
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............................... 62
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY..................................... 62
Location And Controls ................................................. 63
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................................. 64
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items.................................................................. 64
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped .................................................................. 66
Programmable Features............................................. 67
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 67
Red Warning Lights..................................................... 68
Yellow Warning Lights ................................................. 70
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................ 73
Green Indicator Lights................................................. 73
White Indicator Lights ................................................. 73
Blue Indicator Lights ................................................... 74
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .................... 74
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................................. 74
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 75
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .....................................................76
Automatic Transmission ............................................ 76
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition ................................ 76
Normal Starting .......................................................... 76
AutoPark ...................................................................... 77
Extended Park Starting............................................... 78
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................... 78
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .......................................... 78
After Starting ............................................................... 78
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................79
PARKING BRAKE ...............................................................79
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................................80
Ignition Park Interlock................................................. 81
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ......................................................................... 81
8-Speed Automatic Transmission.............................. 81
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ...........................................85
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................................85
POWER STEERING ..............................................................85
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .................86
Cruise Control ............................................................. 86
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................................... 87
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .....................................................95
ParkSense Sensors..................................................... 95
ParkSense Display ...................................................... 95
ParkSense Warning Display ....................................... 98
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ............................98
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System...............98
Cleaning The ParkSense System................................98
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ......................99
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ............................................99
LaneSense Operation..................................................99
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .................................. 100
LaneSense Warning Message ................................. 100
Changing LaneSense Status.................................... 102
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .......................... 102
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............................................... 103
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ....................... 104
VEHICLE LOADING .......................................................... 104
Vehicle Certification Label ...................................... 104
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ..................... 105
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .......................... 105
Overloading ............................................................... 105
Loading ..................................................................... 105
TRAILER TOWING ........................................................... 105
Common Towing Definitions .................................... 105
Trailer Hitch Classification ....................................... 107
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ......................... 107
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...................................... 108
Towing Requirements............................................... 108
Towing Tips ............................................................... 110
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ................................................. 110
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 110
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ................................... 110
Driving Through Water ............................................. 111
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................................112
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................................112
UCONNECT SETTINGS .....................................................112
Customer Programmable
Features — Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .............113
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .................126
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........................126
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................127
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................127
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..................128
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .......................................132
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ............132
Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) With Mitigation Operation — If Equipped ......135
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...............137
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................140
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...................140
Important Safety Precautions...................................140
Seat Belt Systems ....................................................141
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................146
Child Restraints ........................................................153
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................162
Transporting Passengers ..........................................162
Transporting Pets .....................................................162
Connected Vehicles...................................................162
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ....................................................162
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .................................................. 164
Exhaust Gas ............................................................. 164
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .................................... 164
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................................... 165
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.................. 165
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...................................... 168
Preparations For Jacking ......................................... 168
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ......................... 168
Jacking And Changing A Tire ................................... 169
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 172
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 172
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 173
REFUELING IN AN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 174
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................................ 175
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .............................................. 175
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 177
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...................................... 178
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models.................................. 179
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ............................. 179
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .............................................................................. 179
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 179
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 180
Maintenance Plan .................................................... 181
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................................... 184
3.6L Engine .............................................................. 184
5.7L Engine .............................................................. 185
Checking Oil Level ................................................... 186
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 186
Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 186
Pressure Washing..................................................... 187
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................ 187
Engine Oil ................................................................. 187
Engine Oil Filter ........................................................ 188
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 188
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................. 188
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 190
Body Lubrication ...................................................... 190
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................................ 191
Exhaust System ........................................................ 192
Cooling System ........................................................ 193
Brake System ........................................................... 195
Automatic Transmission .......................................... 196
All Wheel Drive (AWD) —
If Equipped ............................................................... 197
Rear Axle ................................................................... 197
Fuses ......................................................................... 197
Bulb Replacement ................................................... 206
TIRES..................................................................................210
Tire Safety Information ............................................210
Tires — General Information ....................................217
Tire Types...................................................................220
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................221
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................................222
Snow Traction Devices .............................................223
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................224
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................224
Treadwear..................................................................225
Traction Grades.........................................................225
Temperature Grades.................................................225
VEHICLE STORAGE ..........................................................225
BODYWORK ......................................................................226
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .....................226
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................226
Preserving The Bodywork .........................................226
INTERIORS ........................................................................227
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................227
Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................227
Leather Surfaces.......................................................228
Glass Surfaces ..........................................................228
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 229
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 229
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ............. 229
Torque Specifications ...............................................229
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 230
3.6L Engine ............................................................... 230
5.7L Engine ............................................................... 230
Reformulated Gasoline ............................................ 230
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 231
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .................................... 231
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.............231
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .................. 232
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ................................. 232
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 232
FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 233
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................. 234
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................ 235
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................ 236
Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 236
Prepare A List............................................................ 236
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 236
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 236
FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 236
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .......................... 236
Mexico ....................................................................... 236
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands........................... 236
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY).................................................................. 237
Service Contract ...................................................... 237
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................237
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................237
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................237
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........237
In Canada...................................................................238
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................238
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................239
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented
documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining
its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important
warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that the authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
1
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 67.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that could
result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 68
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 68
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 68
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 68
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 69
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 69
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 69
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 69
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 69
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 68
Red Warning Lights
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 70
Trunk Open Warning Light
Ú page 69
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 70
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 71
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 70
Red Warning Lights
1
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 71
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 71
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 72
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 71
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 70
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 71
Service AWD Warning Light
Ú page 71
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 71
Yellow Warning Lights
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 71
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
Ú page 70
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Yellow Warning Lights
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 73
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 74
1
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and remote trunk release. The key fob allows you to lock
or unlock the doors and trunk from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving
at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow
Ú page 239.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors and the trunk. To lock all the doors
and the trunk, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
the Vehicle Security system (if equipped) will arm.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock automatically if
the key fob is left inside the passenger compartment,
otherwise the doors will stay locked.
1 — Unlock
2 — Trunk Open
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC Button
6 — Emergency Key
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 112.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the courtesy
lights, overhead lights, and approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn on.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the
Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the
doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob
and pulling the emergency key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-head
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of
the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
dren.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the OFF position.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 239.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows).
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, etc.).
START
The engine will start (when brake pedal is pressed).
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by pushing
the button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery.
In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in ON/
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or
Accessory On” in the cluster.
For more information on normal engine starting proce-
dures, see
Ú page 76.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security.
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range
Ú page 239.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed through the Uconnect Settings). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote
Start button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and with a
valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob in the vehicle, press the
brake pedal and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
Remote Start can only be used twice. The ignition must
be placed in the ON/RUN position before the Remote
Start sequence can be repeated for a third cycle.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security Light is flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with
another push and release of the Remote Start button on
the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire
15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume
the previously set operations (temperature,
blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will display
in the instrument cluster display until you push the
START/STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 112. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will
adjust the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode,
with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 45.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The climate control settings will change if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start
mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn the system
off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, trunk, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 21.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the
system.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system. Use of the door key cylinder when the system
is armed will sound the alarm when the door is opened.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
trunk, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and the
rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
doors are set to unlock on first press within Uconnect
Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and trunk for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system
also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and vehicle
tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle
interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor monitors the
vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry
transport, etc.).
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights will
flash followed by approximately five seconds of no activity.
This will continue for eight cycles if no action is taken to
disarm the system.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a key fob available in the same
exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof (if equipped) are
open, close them.
NOTE:
When armed, the interior motion sensor detects move-
ment within the vehicle's interior, including moving
objects (i.e. people and pets) and air currents through
open windows or the sunroof. The windows and
sunroof should be closed, and moving objects should
not be left in the vehicle when the intrusion detection
is armed, otherwise false alarms can occur.
Once the security system is armed, it remains in that
state until you disarm it by following either of the
disarming procedures described. If a power loss occurs
after arming the system, you must disarm the system
after restoring power to prevent alarm activation.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but disable the
alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 21.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position
by pushing the START/STOP ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power trunk entry. If a valid key fob or key fob passive
entry is used to open the trunk, the motion sensing will
be suppressed until after the trunk is closed. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but disable the
alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel
downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the
lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
Door Lock Knob
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button on
the front door panel is used to lock the door. This will occur
for two attempts. Upon the third attempt, the doors will
lock even if the key is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock automati-
cally.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in ACC
or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not
lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may
be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 112.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
whichever timing is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90
seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lights.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/snowing on
the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
(if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition is placed in the OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter
‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing
the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver door
automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle will
unlock both doors automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 112.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Trunk
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either door handle, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button will lock both doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid, push the button on the right side of the Center
High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL), which is located on
the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry key
fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid
will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid
Ú page 239.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 112.
The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
The driver door is opened.
The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on
the door lock knob (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the control upward until
fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering
column control is located below the multifunction lever on
the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
saved positions
Ú page 26.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This timing
will vary based on environmental temperatures. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within the
Uconnect system. You can access the button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 17.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect
system.
NOTE:
The NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps menus of
your touchscreen means you have the Uconnect 4C NAV
system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.
Voice Recognition
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your VR
system.
Helpful hints for using VR:
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to program-
ming the memory settings.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The VR Button To Begin Radio, Media, And
Climate Functions
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
The memory settings switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory button
(1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster
display will display which memory position has been
set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 112.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children at any
time. They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with eight-way power driver
and front passenger seats. The power seat switches are
located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down
using the power seat switch. The front of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control (If Equipped)
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (6.1
cm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
or equal to 2.7 inches (6.8 cm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or RUN posi-
tion.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (2.3 cm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
Ú page 26.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 17.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each heater
are located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of indicator lights changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate and
control screen in the Uconnect system. The
fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
ventilated seat off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 17.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHR will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
The RHR will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHR do not return to their
normal position, see an authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions: up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied, the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a colli-
sion and could result in serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraint should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If the center
rear head restraint requires removal, see an autho-
rized dealer.
The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate
height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 112.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor is
against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
S
IGNAL AND APPROACH LIGHTING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and
approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are located in
the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the key fob or open
any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front
and rear door handles. It also shines downward to
illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition
is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the gear
selector is moved out of the PARK position.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power Mirror Controls
Power mirror positions can be saved with a Driver Memory
Settings profile
Ú page 26.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the drive position. If the mirror does not electrically
fold, check for ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area which
can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them by
pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 45.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror positioning
which will assist with the driver’s ground visibility. The
outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the
present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE.
The outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the vehicle
is equipped with memory settings, this feature will be
linked to the programmable settings.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system Ú page 112.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active
Ú page 239.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, follow these steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3.
4. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 37. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter.
Do not program the transmitter if people or pets are
in the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels, follow
the procedure below. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button to
has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior
lights and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter.
Do not program the transmitter if people, pets or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only
use this transmitter with a garage door opener that
has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these safety
features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the AUTO position for automatic
headlights. Rotate to the second detent to turn on
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights
operation.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and will remain on unless the headlights are
turned to the on position, the parking brake is applied, or
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto High
Beam” within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 112, as well
as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized
dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition in the OFF
position. The headlight time delay can be programmed
0/30/60/90 seconds within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 112.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
PARKING LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the
O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower
nighttime intensity.
ADAPTIVE BI-XENON HIGH INTENSITY
D
ISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
the direction the vehicle is being steered.
NOTE:
Each time the Adaptive Headlight system is turned on,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
sequence of rotations.
The Adaptive Headlight system is active only when the
vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight system can be turned on or off
using the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off within 45 seconds. Headlight
delay can be canceled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system Ú page 112.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch. To
turn off the front fog lights, either push the headlight
switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or
parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam head-
lights will turn off the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with
the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove
compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior
light operation after automatic battery protection is
enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/
RUN position, or cycle the light switch.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for
nighttime visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
Ambient Light
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights, map pocket lights, and ambient light located in the
overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting and lighted
cupholders (if equipped) can be regulated by rotating the
left dimmer control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When
the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness
of the instrument cluster display, radio and overhead
console by rotating the control to the first detent up until
you hear a click. This feature is useful when headlights are
required during the day. Rotating the dimmer control up to
the second detent, the farthest position up, turns on the
courtesy lights regardless if the doors are opened or
closed.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wipers
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which
allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of
one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately
36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for two cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
1 — Push End Inward For Washer
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation And Mist
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
and release for a single wiping cycle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 191.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for normal rain
conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
Products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain
Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
a Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in Remote Start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any
position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. In
MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to the desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cancel MAX A/C.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The A/
C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is
on. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for
warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the
blower speed and air distribution. Air
Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to
improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
Ú page 48.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the Climate Control system will return to the
previous setting.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
NOTE:
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the
heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window.
Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with
warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or press and
release the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to change the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 112.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust
the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command
will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel
if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 225.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Glove Compartment
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to the
(Panel Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode) position.
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
on (A/C) to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
the (Floor Mode)
position. If windshield
fogging starts to occur,
move the control to the
(Mix Mode) position.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cubby Bin
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated door.
Push inward on the door to open it; push the door a
second time to close it.
Cubby Bin
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Console Features
Two separate storage compartments are located
underneath the center console armrest.
Center Console Location
Center Console Open
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for small
items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray, the
lower storage compartment is made for larger items.
In addition, the 12 Volt power outlet, USB, and AUX jack
are located here.
Upper Storage Tray
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the
center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash
receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers, there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Rear Armrest Storage
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a push-push design. Push the
chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on
the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if
equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
AUX/USB Ports
Located on the rear of the center console are dual USB
charge only ports. The USB charge only ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear USB Charging Ports
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front
passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a light ring
that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers.
The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control
Ú page 43.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
POWER SUNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade that
will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through
the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect
system
Ú page 112.
Press the Controls button and then press the Rear
Sunshade button to raise the power sunshade. Press the
Rear Sunshade button a second time to lower the
sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically fully
lower. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE
the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised
position after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers
in the rear seats. The power sunshade switch is located on
the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Push the switch once to raise the sunshade.
Push the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch Behind Center Console
NOTE:
The rear sunshade control switch can be locked out along
with the rear passenger window controls from the driver
switch window lockout switch.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet in the center console that can be used to
power cellular phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” symbol or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a key symbol are powered when the ignition switch is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled
with a battery symbol are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Center Console Power Outlet
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the maximum
power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center console power
outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use, the outlet can
deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear console
USB ports can be changed to battery powered at all times
by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. These
fuses are located in the fuse box in the trunk, below the
load floor.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power
Outlet/Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power
Outlet/Media Hub
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 112.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down to the second detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Pull the window switch up to the second detent and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may
need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button. To enable the
window controls, push and release the window lockout
button again.
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
1 — Sunroof Close Switch
2 — Vent Switch
3 — Sunroof Open Switch
4 — Sunshade Close Switch
5 — Sunshade Open Switch
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop
automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof and
sunshade will remain in a partially opened position until
the switch is operated and held again.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent switch within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. During vent
operation, any other movement of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent
switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to
the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to
the Vent position.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
HADE
Express Open/Close
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch again to fully open the shade.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the switch again and the
shade will fully open.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the
shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the
switch is pushed again.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accessory
Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the
vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Reach under the hood, move the safety latch to the
left, and lift the hood.
Hood Safety Latch
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its
own inertia.
TRUNK
OPENING THE TRUNK
The trunk may be opened in several ways:
Power trunk release button on the instrument panel
Trunk button on the key fob
Trunk Passive Entry button
Ú page 21
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk open
symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that
the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once
the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Power Trunk Release Button
The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release button
located on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in PARK before the button will
operate.
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to release the trunk.
Passive Entry Button
Push the trunk Passive Entry button which is located on
the right side of the trunk lid. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk, push the Passive Entry
button to open the trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
CLOSING THE TRUNK
With one or more hands placed on the outside trunk
surface push the trunk lid down until you hear the trunk
lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key fob isn’t
inside the trunk area. The trunk will latch then automati-
cally unlock if the key fob is detected, not allowing the key
fob to be locked in the trunk area.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
TRUNK SAFETY
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The trunk
mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud,
snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either
by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the
inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when
your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young
children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children
can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lb (22 kg)
of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to hook
and mounting surface.
2
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 61
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 62.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The warning / indicator Lights will briefly illuminate for a
bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 193.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow buttons allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through the currently
selected menu or options presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the
up and down
arrow buttons will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
Pushing the
OK button makes the selection. A confir-
mation screen will appear, returning the user to the
first page of the submenu.
Pushing the
left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus:
Information is reset by pushing and holding the
OK
button.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or
arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
pop-up message of "To reset oil life engine must be
off with ignition in run" will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
screen.
5. Push and release the
up or down arrow button
to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE MENU ITEMS
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the
OK button to toggle between mph
and km/h.
Vehicle Info
The Vehicle Info consists of the following submenu
(pushing the
left or right arrow button will allow you
to scroll through the submenu):
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
AWD Status — If Equipped
Battery Voltage
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and a visual
about the Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense
features. When they are both off the screen, the display
will read "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense
Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings
Ú page 87. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC Set
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings
Ú page 99. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status. Push the
LaneSense button (located on the center stack below the
Uconnect display) until one of the following displays in the
instrument cluster display:
LaneSense Off
When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will read
“LaneSense Off.”
LaneSense On
When LaneSense is activated, the display will read
“LaneSense On.”
Fuel Economy
The Fuel Economy Menu has two submenu pages; one
with Current Value (instantaneous calculation of the fuel
economy) displayed and one without the Current Value
displayed (toggle the
left or right arrow button to
select one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
Hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the currently
playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages, if any. Pushing the
left or right arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the stored
messages.
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
NOTE:
Screen Setup is available only when the vehicle is not in
motion.
Restore Default
OK
Cancel
Current Gear
On
Off
Odometer
Show
Hide
Fuel Gauge
Standard
Detailed
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 68.
Upper Left
None Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Trip B Distance
Time
Current (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Compass
Upper Right
None Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Trip B Distance
Time
Current (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Compass
Center
Compass Outside Temp Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Current (MPG,
L/100 km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio
Information
Menu Title Digital Speed None
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel —
If Equipped
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of the charging
system. The charging system is still functioning prop-
erly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any
(load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles
(distance, driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
The instrument cluster display can be used to view or
change the following settings. Push the
up or down
arrow button to scroll through the main menus, then push
the
right arrow button to scroll through the submenus
of each menu item. Push the
left arrow button to scroll
back to a previous menu or submenu.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active warning lights will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some warning lights are optional and may not appear.
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 140.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
system
Ú page 85.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 175.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is
open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.
Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the Vehicle
Security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service
Ú page 87.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with
visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid green
to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green
to flashing yellow
Ú page 99.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.9 gal (7.13 L), this light will turn on and a
single chime will sound.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 186.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 135.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This
can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
warning light when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure warning light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure warning light. When
the system detects a malfunction, the warning light will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
warning light after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off
Ú page 135.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will display the distance setting for
the ACC system when the system is engaged
Ú page 87.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 87.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 86.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on Ú page 39.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is “armed” and
ready to provide visual and torque warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 99.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
Ú page 39.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
Ú page 87.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 86.
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when only
left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 99.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 112.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before you
can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
will display a “
Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed below
5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition
will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle will AutoPark
Ú page 77.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
position.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and
near the gear selector. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the “Extended
Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after following the “Normal
Starting” procedure and has not experienced an extended
park condition as defined previously, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold
it there. Crank the engine for no more than 10 seconds.
This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 172.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
(Continued)
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to
50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory are high-quality and
energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should
be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 234.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil
level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking
brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully. To release
the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is
placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the
gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both
above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
To access the L or S position, push down on the gear
selector and then rotate it. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK
to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the
transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Premium Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc
Ú page 84.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position, and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control (if equipped) to select a lower gear
Ú page 84. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased
to make full use of available engine power.
To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector
and rotate it fully clockwise, or push the SPORT button in
the center stack.
LOW (L) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will
downshift for increased engine braking. To access the
LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate
it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver
of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For “Recreational Towing”
Ú page 110
For “Towing A Disabled Vehicle”
Ú page 178
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will
operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of
the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will activate a
temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission will revert
back to normal operation after a period of time, depending
on accelerator pedal activity.
When the transmission gear selector is in the SPORT
position, tapping either shift paddle will activate
"permanent" AutoStick mode. The transmission will
remain in AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately
disables AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-) to
enter AutoStick will downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain the
current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Paddle Shifters
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the trans-
mission will automatically shift up when maximum
engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
pressed, the transmission will downshift when possible
(based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack of
accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to
revert to automatic operation.
If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear
selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selec-
tion will be maintained until the gear selector is
returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The trans-
mission will not upshift automatically at redline in this
mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the acceler-
ator pedal is pressed to the floor.
In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to
prevent engine lugging) and will display the current
gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
1 — Shift Paddle Downshift
2 — Shift Paddle Upshift
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in SECOND
gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed will downshift the trans-
mission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift
paddle until "D" or "S" is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also
disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
If your vehicle is equipped with SPORT mode, this mode is
a configuration set up for typical enthusiast driving. The
engine, transmission and steering systems are all set to
their SPORT settings. SPORT mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering
feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by
pushing the SPORT button on the instrument cluster
switch bank.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full function-
ality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system provides increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability in tight
spaces. The system adapts to different driving conditions.
If the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 113.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST
OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service
Ú page 67.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers
may have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
few moments until the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light and message turn off.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control system takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h), or 20 mph (32 km/h) depending on engine
size and axle ratio.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push and release the SET (+) or SET (-)
button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating the set speed. A Cruise Control
Indicator lamp along with set speed will also appear and
stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accelerate
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decelerate
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control
system without erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 86.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning systems.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 239.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following the vehicle in front and hold the
vehicle for two seconds in the stop position. If
the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds the ACC system will display a
message that the system will release the brakes
and that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the brakes
are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Setting Increase
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
NOTE:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a vehicle in front and hold the vehicle for two
seconds in the stop position. If the vehicle in front does
not start moving within two seconds, the ACC system
will display a message that the system will release the
brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 89.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front, your vehicle
will resume motion without any driver interaction if the
vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
With Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC With Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC With Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal (Lane Change Assist feature included)
and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
Switching lanes will not impact the ACC system if the driver
is already traveling at the set speed.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster will display
the warning message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be careful not to damage
the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/
or front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver).
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see
Ú page 99.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These
distances depend on the location, type, and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper. These
distances depend on the location, type, and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE, or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the second
flashing arc and will change to a continuous tone when the
first flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
tone will change from fast to continuous.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Fast
(for rear center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected in
the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 112.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 62. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “ParkSense Off” message for approximately
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster will display the “ParkSense Off” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" pop-up message for five seconds.
After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with
"UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumpers are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Once you turn Park-
Sense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even
if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within
the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane, the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
Sense.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual
warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the
steering wheel and provide an audible warning to the
driver if removed. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the center
stack below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off).
A “LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on). A “LaneSense Off” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state, on
or off, from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking has
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
has been detected.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/med/late) that you can configure through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
NOTE:
When enabled, the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with the use of the turn
signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the radio display screen along
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear license plate.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if the
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the gear
selector is shifted into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the user presses the
touchscreen X button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
Delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When manually activated, a counter will be initiated after
the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h). The rear
view camera image will turn off when this counter reaches
10 seconds. The counter will be reset when the vehicle
speed is 8 mph (13 km/h) or below. If the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the rear view camera
image will continue to be displayed until the transmission
is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position, or the touchscreen X button is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. Different
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
(Continued)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in
the driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seal the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for five seconds to allow
nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the spare tire
area) to open the flapper doors to allow for emergency
refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
It is recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when backing up, especially in
sunny weather conditions, since there may be a glare
from the sun at certain angles that can make the
image on the touchscreen difficult to see.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an
emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side
inner trim panel).
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable.
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer.
Month and year of manufacture.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Type of vehicle.
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH).
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's
GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly
as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have
exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWRs
Ú page 104.
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle's proper tire
pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 105.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front or
rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 105.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Infor-
mation” placard
Ú page 210.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing”
Ú page 180. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
For the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing
tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 210.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an acci-
dent.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
dent.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control (if
equipped) to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a tow dolly) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable
method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is
on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
(Continued)
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Warnings and
Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
4
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive
information. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve the user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a
security breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available Uconnect soft-
ware updates.
Only connect and use trusted media devices
(e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest autho-
rized dealer immediately.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
MULTIMEDIA 113
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES — UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
S
ETTINGS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this menu, the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages
are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the
display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness
of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
MULTIMEDIA 115
Units
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will allow you to turn the SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Clock
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format.
The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
MULTIMEDIA 117
Camera
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
This setting will activate Forward Collision Warning Active Braking. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
MULTIMEDIA 119
Mirrors & Wipers
Power Steering Default
This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are “Normal”,
“Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the ignition is placed in REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the ignition is placed in REVERSE. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to
shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”,
“60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button
is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
MULTIMEDIA 121
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button
is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
to the key fob.
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
Key Off Options
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the
vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set
to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are
“Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings are
“Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto
Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s touchscreen.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
SiriusXM® Setup
Reset
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 239.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
127
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Rain Brake
Support (RBS) and Ready Alert Braking (RAB).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if
equipped). See
Ú page 129 in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC
(except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section) has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button will toggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC
On" mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" are ESC
“Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON position. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
ously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road
use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 112
for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM Warning Light randomly alerting on the trailer or
even remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle
is in a forward gear
Ú page 112.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
warning indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system
may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or
parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is detected,
a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both mirror
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
This is normal operation. The system will automatically
recover and resume function when the condition clears.
To minimize system blockage, do not block the area of the
rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
and keep it clear of road contaminations.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume if the
corresponding turn signal is activated
Ú page 135.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 239.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection —
If Equipped
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION OPERATION —
I
F EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors, as well as the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system, to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required. If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum or partial braking to
mitigate the potential forward collision.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 239.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings due to
the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the system to
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in
"Uconnect Settings" under "Safety And Driving
Assistance". Forward Collision can be checked or
unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW OFF" icon
that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW system
state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next.
If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the
vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is set to “on”; this allows the system to warn
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are farther away and it applies limited braking.
This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW disables in the same manner as ACC, and will
display a screen indicating that the feature is unavail-
able when it has been disabled.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 210 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure
in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module
Ú page 239.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors.
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display
an “Inflate to XX” message and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment Manufac-
turer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure inflation value as shown in the “Inflate to XX”
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will change color
back to the original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies
as the TPMS sensors.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Service Tire Pressure System” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire
Pressure System” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies
(road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure
System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “Service
Tire Pressure System” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle
the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer
be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 153.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint Ú page 153.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 236 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on
vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 159.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 67.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label
Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel
between the rear seatback and the rear
window. They are found under a plastic cover
with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 159 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. See
Ú page 158 for typical
installation instructions.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 161 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 145 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward-facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 161 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward
to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If
there is no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 156 for
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Center Tether Attachment
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head
restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located in the panel
between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 74.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
(Continued)
(Continued)
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 140.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an existing
floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
6
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
165
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
switch bank above the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when your
vehicle is disabled or is signaling a safety hazard warning
for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 239.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
connected to a representative for assistance. Road-
side Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving
and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
Assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 167
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer”.
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer”.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack, tools and spare tire are stowed under an access
cover in the trunk.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access the
jack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
WARNING!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 169
Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counter-
clockwise to remove it.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire to access the jack.
Jack Location
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counter-
clockwise to remove it.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from
under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to
loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
JACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated for lifting
this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Warning Label
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking
locations.
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack
on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 171
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center
cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 221.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station
Ú page 229.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the
right side of the vehicle looking over the fender. The
positive battery post may be covered with a protective cap.
Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery
post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post which has a positive
(+) symbol on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and cycle the ignition to
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the
remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake, and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Remote Negative (-) Post
Remote Positive (+) Post
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 173
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables
are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to the remote negative
(-) post (exposed
metallic/unpainted post of the discharge vehicle)
located directly behind the under-hood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnection
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative
(-)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN AN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Cap-Less Fuel System. The funnel is located under the
load floor in the trunk. If refueling is necessary, while using
an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the
filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
Fuel Funnel Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 175
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver's seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will
not shift out of PARK (such as a depleted battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
To use the Manual Park Release see the following steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the
Manual Park Release lever.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
6. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up
and rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical
position. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
moved. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Engaging The Lever
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear
side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the
lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
When the lever is in the release position the access cover
cannot be reinstalled.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 177
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 129. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch
or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free
a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, instructions on shifting the transmission out
of PARK for towing
Ú page 175.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
FCA US LLC does not recommend towing this vehicle
using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 179
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN
mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) (not in PARK!),
and the rear wheels
OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the
ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must
be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a
flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) MODELS
FCA LLC US recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when the
engine is off
Ú page 175.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 152.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 153.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for the vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only
a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 181
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,
000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 183
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
X X
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive
(AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 185
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the instrument cluster.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump starting
Ú page 172.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 172.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 187
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emission control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L/5.7L Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 234.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and then
quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is normal
and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is
started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. Other
causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an extended
period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the
nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar® engine oil filters
are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 180.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 189
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by an authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the
hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the
passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield
wipers. When installing a new cabin air filter, ensure its
proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by
pressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the cabin air filter access
cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used cabin air filter.
4. Install the new cabin air filter with arrows pointing in
the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the cabin air filter will
indicate this).
Cabin Air Filter
5. Close the cabin air filter access cover.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 180.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 191
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and
away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade onto the arm until motion stops,
then fold down the locking tab to secure.
NOTE:
The locking tab will not snap into place until the blade is
properly positioned on the wiper arm hook.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO
Ú page 164.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 193
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emission control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires discon-
nected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or
for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
NOTE:
Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped with an
Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the exhaust
system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 180.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 234.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact a
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 195
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically
Ú page 180.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when
performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recommended by the
manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture
Ú page 235.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 235. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 197
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 235. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The All Wheel Drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these
components should be inspected for evidence of fluid
leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as
possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case
fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level
should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug
to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover
near the half shaft attachment. To inspect the differential
fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be
even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 180.
REAR AXLE
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level
Ú page 235.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder
Ú page 235.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed
on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/ functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/ not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 199
Front Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02
40 Amp Green
–
Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L & Non – Police)
50 Amp Red Radiator Fan (6.2L & Police)
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F03 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #1 *
F04 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F05 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brakes
F06 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brakes
F07 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module *
F10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) * / Under Hood Lamp (Police)
F11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F12 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 20 Amp Yellow LH HID Headlamp *
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow RH HID Headlamp *
F18 50 Amp Red – Rad Fan #2
F19 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #2 *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
F21
20 Amp Blue
–
Police Bat Feed #2
30 Amp Pink Hdlp Washers *
F22
20 Amp Blue
–
Police Bat Feed # 3
40 Amp Green LTR Cooling Pump (6.2L Eng)
F23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
F24 20 Amp Blue – Police Ign Run/ACC Feed # 3
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 201
F28 – – Spare
F29 – 15 Amp Blue Auto Trans (Challenger / Police)
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
F35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
F36 – 10 Amp Red AntILock Brake Module / Strg. Clmn. Lock Module *
F37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
F38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F39 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch / EPS */ Vacuum Pump *
F48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Mod / Front Axle Disconnect *
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump *
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise Control *
F53 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power
distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F02 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
F03 – – Spare
F04 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
F05
30 Amp Pink
–
Sunroof *
20 Amp Blue Dome Lamp – Police
F06 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
F07 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
F08 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
F09 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
F11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow
Cigar Lighter / IP APO / RR USB
(Selectable Fuse) *
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 203
F15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
F16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
F17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
F18 30 Amp Pink – VISM Mod (Police)
F19 – – Spare
F20 – – Spare
F21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L ADR)
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
F23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door SW * / Diagnostic Port
F24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
F25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Mod (Charger / 300)
F27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier *
F31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats *
F32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module / Cluster
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
IGN SW / Wireless Mod / Steer Clmn Lock
Mod / Remote Start *
F34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module / Clock (300)
F35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Active Exhaust Valve *
F37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump #1 (6.2L ADR)
F41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump #2 (6.2L ADR)
F42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats * / Heated Steering
Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist */ Blind Spot */ Rear View
Camera *
F45 – 15 Amp Blue
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Lane Departure *
F46 – – Spare
F47 – 10 Amp Red
Adaptive Front Lighting */ Day Time
Running Lamps *
F48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L*/ 6.2L)
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated */ Vented Seats *
F52 – 10 Amp Red
Heated Cup Holders */ Rear Heated Seat
Switches *
F53 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC Module / In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 205
F58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
F65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F66 – – Spare
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain & Light Sensor */ Sunroof */ Inside
RearView Mirror / Police Run Acc
F68 – 10 Amp Red Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade *
F69 – – Spare
F70 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 207
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) 9005HL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp LED
Daytime Running Lamp LED
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED
Front Side marker Lamp LED
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp LED
Rear Side marker Lamp LED
Backup Lamp LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License LED
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) HEAD-
LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
position.
Because of this, you should not attempt to
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails,
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the
headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights.
This diminishes and becomes more white after approxi-
mately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
BI-HALOGEN LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary
prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the
driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grab the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise,
and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
Headlamp Bulb Location
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the
headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized
dealer for service.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 209
7. Reinstall the access cap making sure it is seated into
the housing and turn cap clockwise to engage locking
lugs. Visually, you should be unable to see the blue
O-ring gasket. The access cap should be uniformly
seated and you should not be able to pull the access
cap off without turning it counterclockwise.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary
prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the
driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
Turn Signal Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grab the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
Turn Signal Bulb Location
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket
and pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into
the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the access cap is not installed correctly after bulb
replacement, the lamp becomes susceptible to dust,
condensation, and water intrusion. This may ultimately
lead to an inoperative lamp. If the access cap cannot
be installed correctly, please return to an authorized
dealer for proper repair or access cap replacement if
necessary.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
REAR BACKUP LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL
LAMPS
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources
that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must
be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized dealer for
further information.
LICENSE LAMP
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading”
Ú page 104.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 104.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation.
Tires may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run
flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information
Ú page 177.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
Ú page 219. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on
the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 210.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use Ú page 109.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or
their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire profile
or equivalent)
Touring Rear
P215/65R17
P225/60R18
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low Profile or
Equivalent
300C NONE
300S NONE
Limited Rear P225/60R18
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low Profile or
Equivalent
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire profile
or equivalent)
Touring
300S
Limited
Rear
235/55R19
P235/55R19
S Class
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed
Ú page 180.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require retight-
ening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 3
weeks, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use care to never the scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar® Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and FCA recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
229
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel.
The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. There
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
may be evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service
station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide excellent fuel economy
and performance when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions
and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 231
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and
drivability problems, damage critical fuel system
components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light
to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline
may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you
should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 233
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst
trademark
Ú page 187.
Mopar® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst
trademark
Ú page 187.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or
exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 method, 0-15% ethanol.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 235
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle We recommend using Mopar® OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
9
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 237
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US
LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
10
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 239
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
10
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 229
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control).............87
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 194
Adding Fuel................................................................... 103
Adding Washing Fluid .................................................. 186
Additives, Fuel.............................................................. 231
Adjust
Forward ......................................................................29
Rearward....................................................................29
Air Bag........................................................................... 147
Advance Front Air Bag ............................................ 147
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 148
Air Bag Warning Light ............................................. 146
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 149
Enhanced Accident Response ......................152
, 179
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 179
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 147
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 151
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 149
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 152
Maintenance........................................................... 152
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 147
Side Air Bags........................................................... 149
Transporting Pets.................................................... 162
Air Bag Light .................................................68
, 146, 163
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 188
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 188
Air Conditioner Refrigerant................................. 188
, 189
Air Conditioner System ..........................................46
, 188
Air Conditioning Filter ............................................49
, 189
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................48
Air Filter .........................................................................188
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................217
Alarm
Arm The System.................................................. 18
, 19
Rearm The System....................................................19
Security Alarm.............................................. 18
, 19, 70
Alarm System
Security Alarm............................................................ 18
All Wheel Drive
Towing ......................................................................179
All Wheel Drive (AWD)...................................................197
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 193
, 233
Disposal ...................................................................194
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................127
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 70
Arming System
Security Alarm............................................................ 18
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................130
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................112
Auto Down Power Windows............................................54
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................23
Automatic Headlights .....................................................40
Automatic High Beams................................................... 40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 48
Automatic Transmission ................................................ 81
Adding Fluid....................................................196
, 235
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................196
Fluid Change ...........................................................196
Fluid Level Check....................................................196
Fluid Type .......................................................197
, 235
Special Additives.....................................................196
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .......... 23
, 83
AutoPark ......................................................................... 77
Autostick
Operation................................................................... 84
AUX Cord ......................................................................... 51
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 53
AWD
Towing...................................................................... 179
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 235
Axle Lubrication ............................................................235
B
Back-Up.........................................................................102
Battery....................................................................68
, 186
Charging System Light.............................................. 68
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 13
Location ................................................................... 186
Belts, Seat.....................................................................162
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 190
B-Pillar Location ...........................................................214
Brake Assist System..................................................... 128
Brake Control System ..................................................128
Brake Fluid...........................................................195
, 235
Brake System ......................................................195
, 229
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
241
Fluid Check.....................................................195, 235
Master Cylinder....................................................... 195
Parking .......................................................................79
Warning Light................................................... 68
, 229
Brake/Transmission Interlock........................................81
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ....................79
Brightness, Interior Lights ..............................................43
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 206
Bulbs, Light..........................................................164
, 206
C
Camera, Rear ............................................................... 102
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 233
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 184
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 194
Car Washes .................................................................. 226
Carbon Monoxide Warning .......................................... 164
Cargo
Vehicle Loading....................................................... 104
Cargo Area Cover ............................................................59
Cargo Compartment .......................................................59
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 126
Certification Label........................................................ 104
Chains, Tire................................................................... 223
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 211
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........75
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 162
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 162
Child Restraint.............................................................. 153
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 155
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 160
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 159
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................154
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............156
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................155
Seating Positions.....................................................156
Child Safety Locks .......................................................... 23
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................230
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................222
Climate Control ........................................................45
, 46
Automatic................................................................... 46
Coin Holder .....................................................................50
Cold Weather Operation................................................. 78
Compact Spare Tire ......................................................221
Console
Floor ........................................................................... 50
Contract, Service ..........................................................237
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................194
Cooling System .............................................................193
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................194
Coolant Capacity......................................................233
Coolant Level ................................................. 193
, 195
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................194
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................193
Inspection ................................................................195
Points To Remember...............................................195
Pressure Cap ...........................................................194
Radiator Cap............................................................194
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 193
, 233, 234
Corrosion Protection.....................................................226
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...............................86
, 87
Cruise Light ..................................................................... 73
Customer Assistance....................................................236
Cybersecurity ................................................................112
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 40
Dealer Service ..............................................................187
Deck Lid
Power Release........................................................... 58
Defroster, Windshield ..................................................163
Deluxe Security Alarm .................................................... 19
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................................... 74
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................................... 40
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 186
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................................178
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....................................194
Door Ajar ......................................................................... 68
Door Ajar Light................................................................ 68
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................................. 23
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ............... 23
Doors............................................................................... 20
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 27
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..................................................111
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 128
Anti-Lock Brake System..........................................127
Electronic Roll Mitigation...............................128
, 131
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................................. 35
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses)............. 198
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................... 86
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................129
11
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light......................69
Emergency Gas Can Refueling.................................... 174
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................................. 177
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 165
Jacking..................................................................... 168
Jump Starting.......................................................... 172
Towing ..................................................................... 178
Emission Control System Maintenance.........................75
Engine..................................................................184
, 185
Air Cleaner............................................................... 188
Break-In Recommendations .....................................79
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 186
Compartment.................................................184
, 185
Compartment Identification................................... 184
Coolant (Antifreeze).......................................193
, 234
Cooling..................................................................... 193
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 164
Fails To Start ..............................................................78
Flooded, Starting .......................................................78
Fuel Requirements ................................................. 230
Jump Starting.......................................................... 172
Oil...........................................................187
, 233, 234
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 184
Oil Filter ................................................................... 188
Oil Selection ................................................... 187
, 233
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 188
Starting.......................................................................76
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .............152
, 179
Ethanol.......................................................................... 231
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 164
Exhaust System................................................... 164
, 192
Exterior Lighting ..............................................................39
Exterior Lights........................................................ 39
, 164
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................188
Air Conditioning ................................................49
, 189
Engine Oil....................................................... 188
, 234
Engine Oil Disposal..................................................188
Flashers.........................................................................165
Hazard Warning.......................................................165
Turn Signals...............................................42
, 73, 164
Flash-To-Pass..................................................................40
Flooded Engine Starting................................................. 78
Floor Console .................................................................. 50
Fluid Capacities ............................................................233
Fluid Leaks ....................................................................164
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................195
Cooling System........................................................193
Engine Oil.................................................................186
Transfer Case ..........................................................197
Fluid, Brake...................................................................235
Fog Lights........................................................................41
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................27
Folding Rear Seats ......................................................... 28
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................135
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................................165
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................177
Fuel................................................................................230
Additives...................................................................231
Clean Air...................................................................230
Ethanol.....................................................................231
Gasoline ...................................................................230
Gauge.........................................................................71
Materials Added ......................................................231
Methanol..................................................................231
Octane Rating................................................ 230
, 234
Requirements.......................................................... 230
Specifications..........................................................234
Tank Capacity..........................................................233
Fuses.............................................................................197
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................................. 36
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................230
Gasoline, Reformulated...............................................230
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................................ 71
Gear Ranges ................................................................... 82
Glass Cleaning..............................................................228
Gross Axle Weight Rating....................................105
, 106
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .......................................105
GVWR ............................................................................105
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water .................................... 111
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................165
Head Restraints.............................................................. 32
Head Rests ..................................................................... 32
Headlights..................................................................... 208
Automatic .................................................................. 40
Cleaning...................................................................226
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 40
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 41
On With Wipers.......................................................... 41
Passing ...................................................................... 40
Switch ........................................................................ 39
Time Delay................................................................. 41
Washers...................................................................186
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
243
Heated Mirrors ................................................................35
Heated Seats...................................................................30
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ...........40
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 130
Hitches
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 107
Holder, Coin.....................................................................50
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................................36
Hood Prop........................................................................57
Hood Release ..................................................................57
I
Ignition.............................................................................15
Switch .........................................................................15
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 33
, 165
Instrument Cluster ...................................................60
, 62
Descriptions ...............................................................73
Display.................................................................62
, 64
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 228
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 227
Interior Lights ..................................................................42
J
Jack Location................................................................ 168
Jack Operation ............................................................. 169
Jacking Instructions ..................................................... 169
Jump Starting ............................................................... 172
K
Key Fob
Arm The System.........................................................18
Unlatch The Trunk......................................................13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........13
Keyless Enter 'n Go™...............................................21
, 76
Enter The Trunk.........................................................13
Passive Entry .............................................................21
Passive Entry Programming......................................21
Keys.................................................................................12
Replacement .............................................................14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals......................................42
Lane Change Assist ........................................................42
LaneSense ......................................................................99
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................142
Latches..........................................................................164
Hood........................................................................... 57
Lead Free Gasoline.......................................................230
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................................164
Life Of Tires ...................................................................219
Light Bulbs .......................................................... 164
, 206
Lights.............................................................................164
Air Bag..................................................... 68
, 146, 163
Automatic Headlights................................................40
Brake Assist Warning ..............................................130
Brake Warning..................................................68
, 229
Bulb Replacement...................................................206
Cruise .........................................................................73
Daytime Running.......................................................40
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................................40
Engine Temperature Warning................................... 69
Exterior.....................................................................164
Fog..............................................................................41
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................165
Headlight Switch........................................................39
Headlights..................................................39
, 41, 208
Headlights On With Wipers .......................................41
High Beam .................................................................40
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 40
Instrument Cluster .................................................... 39
Intensity Control........................................................ 43
Interior ....................................................................... 42
License.....................................................................210
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 41
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..................... 71
Map............................................................................ 43
Park..................................................................... 41
, 73
Passing ...................................................................... 40
Reading...................................................................... 43
Seat Belt Reminder................................................... 68
Security Alarm ........................................................... 70
Service ..................................................................... 206
Traction Control.......................................................130
Turn Signals........................................ 40
, 42, 73, 164
Vanity Mirror .............................................................. 34
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........ 69
, 73
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................................... 66
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction........................... 66
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........................... 66
Loading Vehicle ...................................................104
, 105
Capacities................................................................105
Tires .........................................................................214
Locks
Auto Unlock ............................................................... 23
Automatic Door ......................................................... 23
Child Protection......................................................... 23
Power Door ................................................................ 21
Low Tire Pressure System............................................137
Lubrication, Body..........................................................190
Lug Nuts........................................................................229
11
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244
M
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 186
Maintenance Schedule....................................... 180
, 181
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..................71
Manual
Park Release........................................................... 175
Service..................................................................... 238
Media Hub .......................................................................51
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..................................27
Memory Seat ...................................................................27
Memory Seats And Radio ...............................................27
Methanol ...................................................................... 231
Mirrors .............................................................................33
Electric Powered ........................................................35
Electric Remote..........................................................35
Heated........................................................................35
Outside .......................................................................34
Rearview........................................................... 33
, 165
Vanity..........................................................................34
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle..........................................................................8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.................................... 137
Mopar Parts.................................................................. 237
MP3 Control ....................................................................51
Multi-Function Control Lever ..........................................40
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........................................79
O
Occupant Restraints .................................................... 140
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 230
, 234
Oil Change Indicator .......................................................64
Reset ..........................................................................64
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................188
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................188
Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 69
Oil, Engine ........................................................... 187
, 234
Capacity ...................................................................233
Checking ..................................................................186
Dipstick ....................................................................186
Disposal ...................................................................188
Filter ............................................................... 188
, 234
Filter Disposal..........................................................188
Identification Logo...................................................187
Materials Added To .................................................188
Pressure Warning Light.............................................69
Recommendation.......................................... 187
, 233
Synthetic ..................................................................188
Viscosity ...................................................................233
Onboard Diagnostic System........................................... 74
Operating Precautions....................................................74
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.......................................................238
Outside Rearview Mirrors...............................................34
P
Paddle Shift Mode .......................................................... 84
Paddle Shifters ...............................................................84
Paint Care......................................................................226
Parking Brake .................................................................79
ParkSense System, Rear................................................95
Passive Entry................................................................... 21
Pets................................................................................162
Placard, Tire And Loading Information........................214
Power
Brakes ......................................................................229
Deck Lid Release.......................................................58
Distribution Center (Fuses) ....................................202
Door Locks................................................................. 21
Mirrors ....................................................................... 35
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)............................. 53
Seats.......................................................................... 29
Steering ..................................................................... 85
Sunroof ...................................................................... 55
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column............................ 24
Windows .................................................................... 54
Power Seats
Forward...................................................................... 29
Lumbar....................................................................... 30
Rearward ................................................................... 29
Recline....................................................................... 29
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................145
Preparation For Jacking ...............................................168
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................................145
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................................218
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ......................... 194
Radio Operation ...........................................................126
Rain Sensitive Wiper System......................................... 45
Rear Axle (Differential).................................................197
Rear Camera.................................................................102
Rear Cross Path............................................................134
Rear ParkSense System ................................................ 95
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................................ 28
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Towing...................................................................... 179
Recreational Towing.....................................................110
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................230
Refrigerant.................................................................... 189
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
245
Release, Hood.................................................................57
Reminder, Lights On .......................................................41
Reminder, Seat Belt..................................................... 141
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm............................................................18
Unlatch The Trunk......................................................13
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................................17
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .........17
Uconnect Settings......................................................17
Remote Trunk Release ...................................................58
Replacement Bulbs...................................................... 206
Replacement Keys ..........................................................14
Replacement Tires ....................................................... 219
Reporting Safety Defects............................................. 237
Restraints, Child........................................................... 153
Restraints, Head .............................................................32
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck....................................... 177
Rotation, Tires .............................................................. 224
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................................... 162
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................................... 164
Safety Defects, Reporting............................................ 237
Safety Information, Tire ............................................... 210
Safety Tips .................................................................... 162
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................................................... 164
Schedule, Maintenance......................................180
, 181
Seat Belt Reminder.........................................................68
Seat Belts ............................................................141
, 162
Adjustable Shoulder Belt........................................ 144
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ................. 144
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......... 144
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................ 145
Child Restraints .......................................................153
Energy Management Feature .................................145
Extender...................................................................144
Front Seat .............................................141
, 142, 143
Inspection ................................................................162
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................143
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................144
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................................142
Operating Instructions.............................................143
Pregnant Women.....................................................145
Pretensioners ..........................................................145
Rear Seat .................................................................142
Reminder .................................................................141
Seat Belt Extender...................................................144
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................145
Untwisting Procedure..............................................144
Seat Belts Maintenance...............................................227
Seats.................................................................. 27
, 29, 30
Adjustment..........................................................27
, 29
Easy Entry .................................................................. 30
Head Restraints.........................................................32
Heated........................................................................30
Height Adjustment..................................................... 29
Power .........................................................................29
Rear Folding........................................................27
, 28
Seatback Release .....................................................28
Tilting................................................................... 27
, 29
Vented........................................................................31
Ventilated................................................................... 31
Security Alarm................................................... 18
, 19, 70
Arm The System.........................................................18
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).................................234
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................................14
Sentry Key Replacement................................................14
Service Assistance........................................................236
Service Contract ...........................................................237
Service Manuals...........................................................238
Shifting............................................................................ 80
Automatic Transmission.................................... 80
, 81
Shoulder Belts .............................................................. 142
Side View Mirror Adjustment ......................................... 34
Signals, Turn...................................................42
, 73, 164
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...........................................223
Snow Tires ....................................................................220
Spare Tires................................................. 168
, 221, 222
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................................................234
Oil .............................................................................234
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................................................... 87
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)............................................. 90
Cancel ........................................................................ 87
Resume...................................................................... 87
Set.............................................................................. 86
Speed Control (Cruise Control)............................... 86
, 87
Sport Mode ..................................................................... 85
Starting............................................................................ 76
Automatic Transmission........................................... 76
Button ........................................................................ 15
Cold Weather............................................................. 78
Engine Fails To Start................................................. 78
Starting And Operating................................................... 76
Starting Procedures ....................................................... 76
Steering........................................................................... 24
Column Lock.............................................................. 24
Power ......................................................................... 85
Tilt Column................................................................. 24
Wheel, Heated........................................................... 25
Wheel, Tilt.................................................................. 24
Storage..........................................................................225
11
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246
Storage, Vehicle .................................................... 49, 225
Storing Your Vehicle..................................................... 225
Stuck, Freeing .............................................................. 177
Sun Roof..........................................................................55
Sunglasses Storage ........................................................51
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ................. 147
Synthetic Engine Oil ..................................................... 188
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)..........................48
Tilt Steering Column .......................................................24
Time Delay
Headlight ....................................................................41
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................ 214
Tire Markings................................................................ 210
Tire Safety Information ................................................ 210
Tires .................................................. 164
, 217, 221, 224
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................................. 219
Air Pressure............................................................. 217
Chains...................................................................... 223
Changing ........................................................168
, 169
Compact Spare ....................................................... 221
General Information ......................................217
, 221
High Speed.............................................................. 218
Inflation Pressure ................................................... 217
Jacking..................................................................... 169
Life Of Tires..............................................................219
Load Capacity ..........................................................214
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..............72
, 137
Quality Grading ........................................................224
Radial .......................................................................218
Replacement ...........................................................219
Rotation....................................................................224
Safety ............................................................. 210
, 217
Sizes .........................................................................211
Snow Tires................................................................220
Spare Tires............................................168
, 221, 222
Spinning ...................................................................218
Trailer Towing ..........................................................109
Tread Wear Indicators.............................................219
Wheel Nut Torque....................................................229
To Open Hood .................................................................57
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .....................................108
Towing ...........................................................................105
Behind A Motorhome ..............................................110
Disabled Vehicle......................................................178
Guide........................................................................107
Recreational ............................................................110
Weight ......................................................................107
Towing Behind A Motorhome.......................................110
Traction ............................................................... 110
, 111
Traction Control ............................................................131
Trailer Towing ...............................................................105
Hitches.....................................................................107
Minimum Requirements.........................................108
Tips...........................................................................110
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 108
Wiring....................................................................... 109
Trailer Towing Guide ....................................................107
Trailer Weight................................................................107
Transfer Case
Fluid ................................................................197
, 235
Maintenance ...........................................................197
Transmission .................................................................. 81
Automatic ......................................................... 81
, 196
Fluid .........................................................................235
Maintenance ...........................................................196
Shifting....................................................................... 80
Transporting Pets .........................................................162
Tread Wear Indicators..................................................219
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ....................................................... 58
Trunk Release Remote Control ..................................... 58
Turn Signals............................................................. 42
, 73
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
247
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings............................................ 17
, 112
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display .............. 113
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ......... 17
, 21, 112
Passive Entry Programming ......................................21
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 224
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
b
........36
Unleaded Gasoline....................................................... 230
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................................. 144
USB ..................................................................................51
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................................34
Vehicle Certification Label........................................... 104
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 229
Vehicle Loading ..........................................104
, 105, 214
Vehicle Maintenance ................................................... 187
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................................... 8
Vehicle Security Alarm....................................................18
Vehicle Storage......................................................49
, 225
Voice Command..............................................................25
Voice Recognition System (VR)......................................25
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................................165
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....... 71
Warranty Information ...................................................237
Washer
Adding Fluid .............................................................186
Washers, Windshield....................................................186
Washing Vehicle ...........................................................226
Water
Driving Through .......................................................111
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................222
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim..........................................222
Wind Buffeting ................................................................55
Window Fogging ............................................................. 49
Windows.......................................................................... 54
Power ......................................................................... 54
Reset Auto-Up............................................................ 55
Windshield Defroster ................................................... 163
Windshield Washers ...................................................... 44
Fluid .........................................................................186
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................................191
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 44
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................191
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 45
11
22_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation,
pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use
public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
Second Edition
_LX_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
